دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsCamcorderD7000

SB0I01(1X)

6MB1021X-01

ﻎﻧﻮﻛ ﻎﻧﻮﻫ ﻲﻓ ﺔﻋﺎﺒﻄﻟﺍ ﺖﲤ

ﻲﻓ ﺰﺟﻮﳌﺍ ﺱﺎﺒﺘﻗﻻﺍ ﺀﺎﻨﺜﺘﺳﺎﺑ)

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﺋﺰﺟ ﻭﺃ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﻠﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﻠﻜﺷ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺎﻤﻬﻣ ﺔﺨﺴﻧ ﻱﺍ ﻞﻤﻋ ﺯﻮﺠﻳ ﻻ

.ﻦﺸﻳﺭﻮﺑﺭﻮﻛ ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻄﺧ ﺢﻳﺮﺼﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ (ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﳌﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺓﺪﻗﺎﻨﻟﺍ ﺕﻻﺎﻘﳌﺍ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (348 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪xi–iv 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪iii–ii 0‬‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ؟ ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ "ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺏ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪325–322 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‬ ‫‪308–305 0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪ii 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪iv 0‬‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪1 0‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪35 0‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪49 0‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪57 0‬‬ ‫‪ #‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫‪67 0‬‬ ‫‪ $‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫‪75 0‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪77 0‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪85 0‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪91 0‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪101 0‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪105 0‬‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪117 0‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪131 0‬‬ ‫‪
PAGE 4
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ "ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﳉﻮﺍﺏ"‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ"؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪RAW (NEF‬؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﲔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺯﻳﺘﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷ
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﺏ ‪ii ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪xii ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ‪xiv........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪1 ...................
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ(‪40 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪41 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪41 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻃﻔﻞ‪41 .............................................................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪75 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪76 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪76 .........................................................................................................
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪117‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪119 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪122 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪123 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪131‬‬ ‫‪131 .........................
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪179‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺐ ‪179 ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪179 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪180 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ‪181 .......................
PAGE 11
‫‪ :a7‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪210 ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ AF :a8‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪211 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪211 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪211 ......................................................................
PAGE 12
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪236 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪236 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪237 ..................................................................................................................LCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪237 ......................................................................
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪269‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪269 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪275 ..........................................................................................(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ‪276 ..........................................................................................Nikon‬‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪280 ....................................................
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﲟﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Nikon‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﳋﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ A‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ )ﻗﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Nikon‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﲔ ﰎ ﺑﺬﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﲟﻮﺍﺩ ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪AVC Patent Portfolio License‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪(I‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪») AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ («AVC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (II‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﳝﺎﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻃﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﲡﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ﹼﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻷﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .MPEG LA, L.L.C‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://www.mpegla.
PAGE 20
xviii
PAGE 21
‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ (SLR‬ﻣﻦ ‪ .Nikon‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﲢﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﺢ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﲡﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺷﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻚ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪77 ,7 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪6 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪77 ,7 ...................
PAGE 23
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪143 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺯﺭ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪143 ................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺯﺭ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪148 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ(‪164 ,109 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ )ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪81 .....................................
PAGE 24
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ 7 210 ..............................‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪81 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪MB-D11‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪145 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪280 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ 8 233 ,13....
PAGE 25
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ‪81 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﻋﲔ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻲ‪81 .................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺯﺭ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‪47 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪175.......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺯﺭ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ‪32 ............................................
PAGE 26
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪—P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪(68 0‬‬ ‫• ‪—S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(69 0‬‬ ‫• ‪—A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(70 0‬‬ ‫• ‪—M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(71 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ )‪.(77 0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪122 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪71 ,69 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪107 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪148 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪120 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪122 .....................................
PAGE 29
‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪216 ..............................................................(d2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪96 ,38 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪94 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪165 ,37.......................
PAGE 30
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪6 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻥ‪68 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪222 ...........................................
PAGE 31
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ"‪215 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪153 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪109 .......‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪112 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪114 .................................................. ADL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪114 ...................................................
PAGE 32
‫❚❚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪60 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪205 .....................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting 3‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪139 ............................................................
PAGE 33
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 34
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )‪.(41 0 ;h‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪h‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(86 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪QUAL‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(88 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪QUAL‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(92 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.
PAGE 35
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(68 0 ;P‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪;M‬‬ ‫‪.(71 ,69 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(71 ,70 0 ;M‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛‬ ‫‪.(105 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.(112 ,110 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ ❚❚ X‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪,A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.(117 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪WB‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ ،(120 0‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ ,(122 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (128 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪BM-11‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(195 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(202 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(206 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(236 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :N‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪(248 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :m/O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ؛ ‪(265 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :J‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EN-EL15‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MH-25‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌ ﹸ ﹶﻮﺿﺢ؛ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ CHARGE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ‪°35–5‬ﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪°0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪°60‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ CHARGE‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ xiii–xii‬ﻭ ‪ 291–289‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪°0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪°40‬ﻡ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪°0‬ﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪°15‬ﻡ ﻭﺑﲔ ‪°45‬ﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪°60‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )‪ (q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ )‪ (w‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ )‪ ،(q‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬ﱈ ‪.AF-S DX NIKKOR 105–18‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(317 0‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪(269 0) CPU‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) A-M‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) VR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ( )‪(26 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪(99 ,55 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 46
‫❚❚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪(VR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬ﱈ ‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR 105–18‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪ ،(VR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪EV 3‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ‪Nikon‬؛ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ VR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (238 0) (Language‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ (237 0‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.(162 0) GPS‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) (SD) Secure Digital‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪ .(319 0‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﲔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪(2‬؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪.(30 0) 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ )‪ (q‬ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪ A‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﳊﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )‪.(179 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪4GB‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﲟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﻗﻔﻞ" ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 236‬ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮﻱ )ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻟﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ﺣﺬﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ i‬ﻭ ‪(j‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪ ،i‬ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ j‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :1‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1000‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺌﺔ؛ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 1200‬ﻭ ‪ 1299‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(1.2 K‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .(30 0) 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ n‬ﺃﻭ ‪ j‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺬﻋﻚ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻗﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻧﺼﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،j‬ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪ A‬ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﳌﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ "ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.39 –35‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪h‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.
PAGE 61
‫❚❚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻃﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻴﻔﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫‪ n‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﻭﻻﻓﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ t‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‪/‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬ ‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻕ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫‪ x‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﺑﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ؛ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻠﺊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺃﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺰﻫﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ؛ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ؛ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.(165 0) 3‬‬ ‫‪N I KON D7000‬‬ ‫‪35mm‬‬ ‫‪1 / 12‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪F5. 6‬‬ ‫‪1/ 125‬‬ ‫‪AUTO1 0, 0‬‬ ‫‪NOR‬‬ ‫‪ORMAL‬‬ ‫‪AL‬‬ ‫‪4928×3264‬‬ ‫‪20100D7000 DSC _0001.
PAGE 67
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .O‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 68
s 48
PAGE 69
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) AF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫! )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 35‬ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺷﺨﺺ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪) %/$‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫! )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) %/$‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪HDMI A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،HDMI-CEC‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪< HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (194 0‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ DK-5‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ،(99 0‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ × 7.7‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
x 56
PAGE 77
‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ (131 0) Picture Control‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫)‪ (141 0‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (49 0) 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ "ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ" )‪ .(52–51 0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﶈﻠﻲ؛ ‪ .(237 0‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺒﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﲤﻮﺝ ﻭﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ,a 1280 × 720 ،q 1920 × 1080‬ﻭ ‪ b 640 × 424‬ﻭﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ★‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪ .(163 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪×2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪×16‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻬﺬﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ L‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ( ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪ D‬ﻗﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﳊﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .62‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ L‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪ :(68 0‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ :(69 0‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ "ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ" ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )‪ 1/6‬ﺙ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ 1/1,600‬ﺙ(‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.S‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ f‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ f‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪:M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪ ”p‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪ .
PAGE 92
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ (S‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ،(M‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﲟﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪—e4‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )‪CLS‬؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (276‬ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ )‪ :(A‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.(281 0) MC-DC2‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ)‪ :(%‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ .(281 0) ML-L3‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U1‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.U2‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 5–1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ‪) d6‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(CH\CL‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) CH‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭ ‪) CL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﺌﺔ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ CH‬ﺃﻭ ‪.CL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CH‬ﺃﻭ ‪.CL‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (281 0‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻲ ‪ E‬ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DK-21‬‬ ‫)‪ (q‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ‪ DK-5‬ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ )‪ .(w‬ﳝﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪DK-21‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪DK-5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ M‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ )‪ .(143 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻲ ‪.MUP‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 104
k 84
PAGE 105
‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(320 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ QUAL‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ < NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺠﻢ )ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪27.6 × 41.7‬‬ ‫‪3264 × 4928‬‬ ‫‪ #‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪20.7 × 31.3‬‬ ‫‪2448 × 3696‬‬ ‫‪ $‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪13.8 × 20.9‬‬ ‫‪1632 × 2464‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫* ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪dpi‬؛ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﻪ=‪ 2.54‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 110
d 90
PAGE 111
‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ )‪ .(99 0‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ (96 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(97 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،AF-A‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﺆ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪96‬؛ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ AF-A‬ﻭ ‪ ،AF-C‬ﺳﺘﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،D‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،AF-A‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 39‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ●‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(93 0‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 118
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ (AF NIKKOR‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪.(93 0‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :AF-S‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) AF-S‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/3.5–5.
PAGE 120
‫❚❚ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ‪ 39‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ .
PAGE 121
‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫"ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ "ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ISO 6400‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ISO 6400‬ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Hi 0.3) EV 0.3‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ (ISO 8000‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ،Hi 2) EV 2‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ .(ISO 25600‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ,A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪Hi 2–Hi 0.3 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﲢﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 125
‫‪Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪) M‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .
PAGE 126
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Z‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(105 0) b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Z‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﱈ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ a .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(105 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ‪) EV –5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪) EV +5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .EV 1/3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) b2‬ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪ .(211 0 ،EV‬ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ‬ ‫‪) b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ D-Lighting ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ )‪ ،(ADL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ "ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ‪ EV 0.3‬ﻭ ‪.EV 2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) b2‬ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪EV‬‬ ‫‪ .(211 0‬ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) e6‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ,(78 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 109‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( < ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪ .
PAGE 132
‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.117‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ WB‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪ e5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 134
‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.139‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪.ADL‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ADL‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪ e5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ‪ y‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺰﺀ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ(‪.
PAGE 136
Z 116
PAGE 137
‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪0‬‬ ‫‪ ،(202‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (119 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ .(123 0‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ WB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .G‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 140
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )”*“( ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪WB‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ WB‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺒﺮﻱ )‪-(A‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪ ;(119 0) (B‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ K‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(119‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﲔ؛ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ )‪ .
PAGE 141
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺩﺍﻓﺊ" ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ( ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺃﺑﺮﺩ" ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﲡﻌﻠﻬﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ WB‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ WB‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) N‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﲢﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(124 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.
PAGE 144
‫❚❚ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ EV 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.(72 0) ±0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ WB‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ b a‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ‪.
PAGE 146
‫❚❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ‪ d-0‬ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ‪d-4–d-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﰎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ‪ d-0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ‬ ‫)‪.(d-4–d-1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ‪ d-0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ d-0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪.(164 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .W‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ )‪0‬‬ ‫‪ (119‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ )‪.
PAGE 149
‫❚❚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 150
r 130
PAGE 151
‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Nikon‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 152
‫‪ Picture Control A‬ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(136 0‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ Picture Controls‬ﺍﳌﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (136 0‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ (131 0) Picture Control‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪ .
PAGE 154
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ –‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ +2‬ﳋﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪ .
PAGE 155
‫‪ A‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪(133 0) 2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Picture Control‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪136‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .Picture Control‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .2‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 158
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Picture Control Utility‬ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Capture NX 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﲢﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﲢﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪ D-Lighting D‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO Hi 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪sRGB W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ "،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،sRGB‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 162
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ sRGB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ )‪ (GN‬ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻫﻮ ‪) 12‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪°20 ،100 ISO ،‬ﻡ( ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 16‬ﱈ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ,s ،o ،n ،p ،k ،i‬ﻭ ‪w‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )‪.(144 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪w ،s ،n ،p ،k ،i‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪M ،S‬‬ ‫‪A ،P‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪+‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ‬ ‫*‬ ‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ S‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 165
‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺳﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Y‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳑﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ"‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺗﻜﺎﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ )ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ RGB 2016‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 167
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪1600‬‬ ‫‪800‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.
PAGE 168
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ –3EV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ +1EV‬ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،1/3EV‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﳉﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﳉﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﲔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪.
PAGE 170
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (e‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ QUAL‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ .
PAGE 173
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﲔ‪ 1/3 ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫❚❚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﳌﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 175
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﲔ )‪.(237 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺙ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 177
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(158 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.(81 0) DK-5‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 178
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ < ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ(‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .(270 0) CPU‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ,SB-700 ،SB-800 ،SB-900‬ﻭ ‪) SB-600‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﳒﻤﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 180
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ‪ 6‬ﻭ ‪ 4000‬ﱈ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ‪ f/1.2‬ﻭ ‪.f/22‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪:CPU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﲔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ‪ (230 0 ,Fn‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ‬ ‫‪) f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.(232 0 ,‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪GP-1‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) GP-1‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ( ﲟﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(281 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،GP-1‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،GP-1‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.GP-1‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 183
‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 4 ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(165 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 171‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 173‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ < ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪;197 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 4‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (.243‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 186
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪100-1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪174 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪248 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ—ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪218 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻀﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﲟﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 188
‫❚❚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪: , 1/ 8000, F4. 8‬‬ ‫‪: , 100‬‬ ‫‪: 0. 0‬‬ ‫‪FOCAL LENGTH : 35mm‬‬ ‫‪: 18– 105‬‬ ‫‪/ 3. 5–5.6‬‬ ‫‪LENS‬‬ ‫‪: S / VR– On‬‬ ‫‪AF / VR‬‬ ‫‪: Built – i n, CMD‬‬ ‫‪FLASH TYPE‬‬ ‫‪: SLOW‬‬ ‫‪SYNC MODE‬‬ ‫‪, : M : TTL, +3. 0 A : TTL, +3. 0‬‬ ‫––– ‪C :‬‬ ‫––– ‪B :‬‬ ‫‪MTR, SPD, AP.‬‬ ‫‪EXP. MODE, I SO‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪11 174 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪248 .....
PAGE 189
‫❚❚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪3‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪NOI SE REDUC. : H I I SO, NORM‬‬ ‫‪ACT . D–L I GHT. : NORMAL‬‬ ‫‪: D– L I GHT I NG‬‬ ‫‪RETOUCH‬‬ ‫‪WARM FILTER‬‬ ‫‪CYANOTYPE‬‬ ‫‪TR I M‬‬ ‫‪: SPRI NG HAS COME. SP‬‬ ‫‪COMMENT‬‬ ‫‪RI NG HAS COME. 3636‬‬ ‫‪N I KON D7000‬‬ ‫‪100--1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪174 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪248 ........................................................................
PAGE 190
‫❚❚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪N I KON D7000‬‬ ‫‪35mm‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪NOR‬‬ ‫‪ORMAL‬‬ ‫‪AL‬‬ ‫‪4928×3264‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1 / 12‬‬ ‫‪1/ 8000, F4. 8‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪+ 1. 0‬‬ ‫‪SLOW‬‬ ‫‪B6, M1‬‬ ‫‪–1. 3‬‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(167 0‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪101 ...........................................................................* ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪274 ,159 .......................................................................
PAGE 191
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ" ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪W/X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (35‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ L‬ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(32 0‬‬ ‫ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .O‬ﳊﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ O‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )‪.(177 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ .(195 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 197
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.
PAGE 198
I 178
PAGE 199
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ UC-E4‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ .ViewNX 2‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EH-5a‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EP-5B‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.UC-E4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺐ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،(280 0) WT-4‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Camera Control Pro 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WT-4‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.ftp‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫)‪(189 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪(183 0‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪(185 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﺄ ﻃﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫)‪(188 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EH-5a‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 203
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .(165 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ;173 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ،(99‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪NEF (RAW) D‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ (85 0) NEF (RAW‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪.(258 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 206
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ,2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ ،1‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .164‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ :13 + W‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .X‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 207
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )‪ ;184 0‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫"ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ" )‪ .(185 0‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 256‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ 256‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪188‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،(185 0) PictBridge‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) 2‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 210
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫)ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(5‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺼﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (A/V‬ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EG-D2‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ C‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (237 0‬ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 212
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(237 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EH-5a‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪) EP-5B‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ C‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 214
‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) HDMI-CEC‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪-‬ﲢﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 215
‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪L‬؛ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ)‪ .(165 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ L‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 218
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪198‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 219
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ ،(203 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 221
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .(195 0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻔﻴﺔ )‪.(196 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ 2 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 222
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،X ،W‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ : W‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : X‬ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﳑﺘﻠﺊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 224
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ .(G‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪) D‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،PC‬ﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ(؛‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 226
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 227
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪c5‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮ
PAGE 228
‫‪ :a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ )‪ ,(91 0‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 229
‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AF-A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ )‪.(91 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪) 5 C‬ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‬ ‫) ‪4‬‬ ‫‪) 3 D‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫( ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .
PAGE 230
‫‪ :a6‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 39 #‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 39‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11 A‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 11‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 231
‫‪ AF :a8‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ .(50 0‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 232
‫‪ :b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪ .(107 0‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 0‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.±0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.
PAGE 233
‫‪ :b4‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ )‪ (‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10 ،8 ،6‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 13‬ﱈ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 8‬ﱈ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.
PAGE 234
‫‪ :c2‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 235
‫‪ :c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﺮﺽ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 236
‫‪ :d2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(9 0‬‬ ‫‪ :d3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ISO/ISO‬ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 237
‫‪ :d6‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﺌﺔ( )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :d7‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﲔ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 238
‫‪ :d8‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .
PAGE 239
‫‪ :d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪ (10 0‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪B‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ )‪W‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 240
‫‪ :d13‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪MB-D11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MB-D11‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AA‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪) LR6 1‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫‪) HR6 2‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪(Ni-MH AA‬‬ ‫‪) FR6 3‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ AA‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 241
‫‪ :d14‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ MB-D11‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ EH-5a‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،MB-D11‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.
PAGE 242
‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪،SB-700 ،SB-800 ،SB-900‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ ,SB-600‬ﻭ ‪ .SB-R200‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪/320‬‬ ‫‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺙ‪ .
PAGE 243
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،(222 0 ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ ,SB-600 ،SB-700 ،SB-800 ،SB-900‬ﻭ ‪ SB-R200‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪.
PAGE 244
‫❚❚ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﲔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ‪ 1/128) 1/128‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪) 12‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪°20 ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻋﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺎﰋ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻛﺄﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻀﻴﺌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 245
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪،SB-900‬‬ ‫‪ ,SB-600 ،SB-700 ،SB-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-R200‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ )‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ (B‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .i-TTL‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ ‪ +3.0‬ﻭ ‪ EV –3.
PAGE 246
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪226‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ – –‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.B‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 247
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻈﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ °60‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ °30‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ(‬ ‫‪ °30‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ °60‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 248
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ – – ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ < ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (M) Y‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ±0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ < ‪ .TTL‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 249
‫‪ :e5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ )‪ .(109 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ )‪ (j‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (k‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (l‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪ (m) WB‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ ،(112 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ (y) ADL‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ )‪ .
PAGE 250
‫‪ :f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ )‪.(72 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪،SB-700 ،SB-800 ،SB-900‬‬ ‫‪ ,SB-400 ،SB-600‬ﻭ ‪ SB-R200‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .(149 0 ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 251
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ )‪.(9 0‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﳌﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ )‪.(231 0‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ".‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 252
‫‪ :f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ ;(230 0) Fn‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :f5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺁﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.AE-L/AF-L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪.AE-L/AF-L‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 253
‫‪ :f6‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻻ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.MB-D11‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 254
‫‪ :f7‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،E‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،ISO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،QUAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،WB‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Z‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪ ،f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Fn‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪ ،f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪
PAGE 255
‫‪ :f10‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MB-D11 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﻨﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.MB-D11‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.MB-D11‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AE-L/AF-L‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.
PAGE 256
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.
PAGE 257
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 49‬ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 259
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ (163 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛‬ ‫‪ .(281 0‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ °90‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .
PAGE 260
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ )‪ (Image Dust Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ‪.(Capture NX 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50‬ﱈ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 261
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﰎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 263
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (169 0‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪.(281 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .137‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪) 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؛ ‪.
PAGE 265
‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 266
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ؛ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ CPU‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ .
PAGE 267
‫ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻨﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :d‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﳑﻜ ﱠﻦ‪.
PAGE 268
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 269
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪X‬؛ ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،164‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 270
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 271
‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ D-lighting‬ﺗﹸﺴﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .
PAGE 272
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪,1 : 1 ,4 : 5 ,3 : 4 ,2 : 3‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 273
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﰌ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﰌ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ 3 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 274
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺯﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﲟﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ”ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ“‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 275
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﳋﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪(167 0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .X‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 276
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﲔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﲔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪;88 ,85 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ .‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 277
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪0.1‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ .2.0‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ‪1.0‬؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0.5‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﳌﻀﺎﻋﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .
PAGE 278
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪X‬؛ ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،164‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 279
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪) 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‪.
PAGE 280
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪X‬؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،164‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ‪ .
PAGE 281
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.25‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 282
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﰎ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺸﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 283
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ(‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪‬ﺴﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺩﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪ .
PAGE 284
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﺤﺔ )ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ (N‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 285
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪.(268 0‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 286
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .V‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4-1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 287
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3-2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 288
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ < ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 289
‫‪n‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪) CPU‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ ،(D‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .IX-NIKKOR‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪،CPU‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪ D‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 290
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 291
‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪:D7000‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪TC-16AS AF‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪AI‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪(1200mm f/11 ,800mm f/8 ,600mm f/5.6 ,400mm f/4.5) AU-1‬‬ ‫• ﻋﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )‪(OP 10mm f/5.6 ,8mm f/8 ,6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/4‬ﻢﺳ ‪2.
PAGE 292
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED‬ﱈ ‪AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–18‬‬ ‫‪ f/3.5– 5.6G ED VR II‬ﱈ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 200–18‬‬ ‫‪ f/2.8G ED‬ﱈ ‪AF-S NIKKOR 70–24‬‬ ‫‪ f/2.8D IF-ED‬ﱈ ‪AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 70–28‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪ f/3.5 ED‬ﱈ ‪PC-E NIKKOR 24‬‬ ‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 200–24‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 70–35‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 28‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 70–35‬ﱈ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﱈ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1.0‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1.
PAGE 293
AF-S/AF-I ‫ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﻴﺮﺗﺮ‬A :‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬AF-I ‫ ﻭ‬AF-S ‫ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬AF-S/AF-I ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﻴﺮﺗﺮ‬ AF-S VR 200–70 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8G ED • AF-S NIKKOR 400 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8G ED VR • AF-S NIKKOR 200–70 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8G ED VR II • AF-S 400 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8D ED • AF-S 200–80 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8D ED • AF-S 400 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8D ED II • AF-S VR Micro 105 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.8G ED 1 • AF-I 400 ‫ ﱈ‬f/2.
PAGE 294
‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪35‬ﱈ ﻫﻲ ‪ 24 × 36‬ﱈ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،D7000‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ‪ 15.6 × 23.6‬ﱈ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪35‬ﱈ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.D7000‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7000‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪35‬ﱈ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪35‬ﱈ(‬ ‫)‪ 24 × 36‬ﱈ(‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(D7000‬‬ ‫)‪ 15.6 × 23.
PAGE 295
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Nikon‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .CLS‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰﺓ ﲟﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪،SB-900‬‬ ‫‪ ,SB-600 ،SB-700 ،SB-800‬ﻭ ‪.SB-400‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 296
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ‪Nikon‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻮﺭ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Nikon‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 297
‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪:CLS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪SB-700 SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪SB-R200 SB-600 SB-800 1 SU-800 SB-700 SB-800 SB-400 SB-600 SB-700 SB-800‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ AA‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬
PAGE 298
‫❚❚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ ،TTL‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 299
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlight‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ,SB-28DX ،SB-80DX‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-50DX‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7000‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،j‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 300
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7000‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪280‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :(24–21 0) EN-EL15‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﳑﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Nikon‬ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :(21 0) MH-25‬ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 301
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :DK-20C‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ‪,+0.5 ,0 ,–2 ,–3 ,–4 ,–5‬‬ ‫‪ ,+2 ,+1‬ﻭ ‪ +3 m–1‬ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﶈﺎﻳﺪ )‪ .(m–1 –1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ )‪ –3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .(m–1 +1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .
PAGE 302
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪282‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 303
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 304
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ”‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 305
‫❚❚ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ”‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 306
‫❚❚ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ”‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ,(284 0‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺼﺢ ‪ Nikon‬ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪.Nikon‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪286‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .
PAGE 307
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.8‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﺷﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺷﺎﺓ‪ .
PAGE 308
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﲔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 309
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﹰ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 310
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻔﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﻔﻔﺔ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.
PAGE 311
‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 312
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 313
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫‪ :a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ :a4‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a5‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :a6‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :a7‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ AF :a8‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ :b2‬ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪EV‬‬ ‫‪ :b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b4‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ :b5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :c1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ L-‬ﻟﺰﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ :c2‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟ
PAGE 314
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪294‬‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ :e4‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ :e5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :e6‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪ D :f1‬ﻝﻮﶈﺍ‬ ‫‪ :f2‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ :f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫‪ :f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺁﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ :f6‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ :f7‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪ :f8‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f9‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ :f10‬ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MB-D11 4‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫✔
PAGE 315
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 316
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪a8‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪296‬‬ ‫‪c5‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪0‬‬ ‫‪208‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪208‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪209‬‬ ‫‪) 3‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪209‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇ
PAGE 317
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪U1‬‬ ‫‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪284‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪194‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GPS‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻴﻞ
PAGE 318
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(P‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪:P‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO 100‬؛ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ f/1.4‬ﻭﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪) f/16‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ f/1.4G ،‬ﱈ ‪(AF-S NIKKOR 50‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪[E‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪f/1‬‬ ‫‪16 16 15‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪f/1.4‬‬ ‫‪f/2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪f/16 − f/1.4‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪f/2.
PAGE 319
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﳑﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪.Nikon‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(281 ,34 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.(35 ,21 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) c2‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪c4‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( )‪.
PAGE 320
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )‪.(32 ,29 0‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ )‪.(39 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(38 0‬‬ ‫• ﰎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ .f-‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) f6‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.
PAGE 321
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(91 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .AF-A‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .AF-S‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪H‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ )‪.(96 ,94 0‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) a7‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪.
PAGE 322
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(M ,A ,S ,P‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﰎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :CPU‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(270 0) M‬‬ ‫• ﰎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ :M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )‪.(69 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻟﺰﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ‪) d11‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ;‬ ‫‪.(219 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .
PAGE 323
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(197 ,165 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ :NEF (RAW‬ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.(85 0) NEF + JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﲟﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 324
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Capture NX 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 325
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﻤﺜﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Nikon‬ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ • d‬ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 326
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f-‬ﺃﻗﻞ(‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬ ‫‪143‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪71 ,69‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ %‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 327
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ‪.Nikon‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪,W‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﳑﺜﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪.
PAGE 328
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ )ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 329
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Nikon‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪D7000‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) Nikon F‬ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ × 1.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪(Nikon DX‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ 16.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS 15.6 × 23.6‬ﱈ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 16.
PAGE 330
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :DX AF NIKKOR‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ Nikkor AF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :D‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ PC Micro-NIKKOR‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪.IX NIKKOR‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF NIKKOR‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ II‬ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.
PAGE 331
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ i) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ; ‪ j‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ((; ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ )‪ k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ; ‪ l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ;‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻃﻔﻞ; ‪ m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ; ‪ n‬ﻣﻘﺮﺏ; ‪ o‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ; ‪ r‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ; ‪ s‬ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﻨﻰ; ‪ t‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‪/‬ﺛﻠﺞ; ‪ u‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ; ‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ; ‪ w‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ; ‪ x‬ﺿﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻌﺔ; ‪ y‬ﺃﺯﻫﺎﺭ; ‪ z‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻒ; ‪ 0‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ; ‪ 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ; ‪ 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ; ‪ 3‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ(; ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻥ )‪ ;(P‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ;(S‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪;(A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪) U1 ;(M‬ﺇﻋﺪ
PAGE 332
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :w ,s ,o ,n ,p ,k ,i‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :0 ,M ,A ,S ,P‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ‪ 12 ,12‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺘﺮ‪° 20 ،100 ISO ،‬ﻡ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :TTL‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2016 RGB‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪SB-900، SB-800، SB-700، SB-‬‬ ‫‪ ,600‬ﺃﻭ ‪) SB-400‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ SB-80
PAGE 333
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ :(AF‬ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ;(AF-S‬ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF-F‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮ
PAGE 334
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﲡﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MB-D11‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ Nikon‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ،AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EH-5a‬؛ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EP-5B‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬ ‫‪ 1/4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ
PAGE 335
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪MH-25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺪﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺮﺝ ﺍﳌﹸﻘﺪﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ‪ 71 × 33.5 × 91.5‬ﱈ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ m 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ‪ 110‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.12–0.23 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 8.4‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 1.
PAGE 336
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬ﱈ ‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 105–18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬ﱈ ‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR 105–18‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ‪ .Nikon DX-format‬ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ )‪ (ED‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻮﻛﻴﻪ(‪ .
PAGE 337
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 67‬ﱈ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-67‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫• ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻧﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪CL-1018‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﻨﻨﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HB-32‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 67‬ﱈ‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LF-1‬ﺃﻭ ‪LF-4‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﳝﻠﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 338
‫❚❚ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ DCF‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.0‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (DCF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exif‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.3‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) Exif D7000‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،2.
PAGE 339
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .D7000‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 340
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SanDisk Extreme SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪-12 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪-14 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 15.
PAGE 341
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AA‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﳌﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ؛ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 342
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪) S‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ( ‪77 ,7 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪) CL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻃﺌﺔ(‪217 ,78 ,77 ,7........‬‬ ‫‪) CH‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ‪78 ,77 ,7 .................‬‬ ‫‪) J‬ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺼﻤﺖ(‪77 ,7 ................................‬‬ ‫‪) E‬ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( ‪80 ,77 ,7 ................................‬‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪80 ,77 ,7 ...............‬‬ ‫‪) MUP‬ﺍﳌﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‪83 ,77 ,7 ..................................‬‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪36 ,35 .....................................
PAGE 343
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪207 ,202 ,151...................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪76 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪207 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪202 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪58 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪60 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪75 ..........................................
PAGE 344
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪176 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪122 ,118 ,117....................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪103 ,101 ......................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪244 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪75 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪66 ,63 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪244 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪243 ,169 ........................................
PAGE 345
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪223 ,222 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪145 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪145 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪145 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪141 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪279 ,273 .............................................................
PAGE 346
326
PAGE 347
PAGE 348
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.